Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG ManualsAudioLG HB965DF

ﻚﻟﺎﳌﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ﺔﻴﻟﺰﻨﳌﺍ ﲈﻨﻴﺴﻟﺍ ﻡﺎﻈﻧ

Network Blu-ray Disc™/DVD

ﺯﺍﺮﻄﻟﺍ

HB965DF (HB965DF, SB95DF-F/W)

P/NO : MFL63740456

.ﺪﻌﺑ ﲈﻴﻓ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻪﺑ ﻅﺎﻔﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﻰﺟﺮﻳ ﲈﻛ ،ﻙﺯﺎﻬﺟ ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺗ ﻞﺒﻗ ﺹﺮﺤﺑ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺓﺀﺍﺮﻗ ﻰﺟﺮﻳ

ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻌﻟﺍ

HB965DF-DD.BAUTLL_ARAB_0456.indd 1HB965DF-DD.BAUTLL_ARAB_0456.indd 1 2010.3.10 5:43:49 PM2010.3.10 5:43:49 PM

Summary of content (94 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪Network Blu-ray Disc™/DVD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﲈ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫)‪HB965DF (HB965DF, SB95DF-F/W‬‬ ‫‪P/NO : MFL63740456‬‬ ‫‪2010.3.10 5:43:49 PM‬‬ ‫‪HB965DF-DD.BAUTLL_ARAB_0456.
PAGE 2
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ( ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﳐﺼﺼﺔ؛‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﲠﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠـﺘﺄﻛﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﴩﻭﺧﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 4
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ٢. D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. L’uso degli apparati è regolamentato da: ١. D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attività soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso private. ٢. D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dell’accesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni.
PAGE 5
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫• ﻛﲈ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻭ‪ +BD‬ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳊﲈﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ BD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺑﲈ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ‪.+BD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪ ،AACS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪BD-‬‬ ‫‪ ROM ، BD‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (BD-ROM/DVD‬ﺑﺤﲈﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺮﺧﺺ‪ .
PAGE 6
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪١٩‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ” “‬ ‫‪٢٤‬‬ ‫‪٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪٢٧‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪٢٦‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﳐﺘﴫ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺇﱃ‬ ‫)‪Advanced Video Codec High‬‬ ‫‪(Definition‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎ
PAGE 7
‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٤٢‬‬ ‫‪٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪٨١‬‬ ‫‪٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪٤٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪٥٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪VR‬‬ ‫‪٨٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪٨٤‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪٨٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫‪٩١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪٥١‬‬ ‫‪٥٤‬‬ ‫‪٥٦‬‬ ‫‪٦٠‬‬ ‫‪٦٢‬‬ ‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫‪٦٨‬‬ ‫‪٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪BD-LIVE‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪iPod‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍ
PAGE 8
‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺇﻻ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻤﺜﻞ ﲠﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪BD‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ” “‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ » « ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﴍﺣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )‪(٢‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(١‬‬ ‫ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ‪-Nero Media‬‬ ‫‪(١) Essentials Home٤‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪(١) FM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﲈﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﺒﻲ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ( )‪(٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ( )‪(٢‬‬ ‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪٨‬ﺳﻢ‪١٢/‬ﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﴍﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺟﲑﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 10
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ‪) CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ (DVD±R/RW‬ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻄﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫) ‪ DVD±R/RW، CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ( BD-R/RE‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫• ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ BD-R/RE، DVD±R/RW‬ﻭ ‪CD-R/RW‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﺨﴢ ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪CD‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﺎﻟﻔ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺴﺨ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﲆ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪“.jpg”، “.jpeg”، “.png”، “.avi”، “.divx”، “.mpg”،‬‬ ‫‪“.mpeg”، “.mkv”، “.mp4”، “.mp3”، “.wma”،‬‬ ‫”‪“.wav‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﻠﻘﲈﺕ ‪.DLNA‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺭﻣﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﳊﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻮ￯ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ »ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ«‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﳐﺘﴫ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺇﱃ‬ ‫)‪Advanced Video Codec High‬‬ ‫‪(Definition‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .AVCHD‬ﻋﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫• • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • ١‬‬ ‫‪١1‬‬ ‫)‪ :1 (POWER‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Z OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻐﻠﻘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ :0-9‬ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :CLEAR‬ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :REPEAT‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • ٢‬‬ ‫‪٣3‬‬ ‫‪ :m/M SCAN‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :./> SKIP‬ﺇﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٧7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦6‬‬ ‫‪٣3‬‬ ‫‪٤4‬‬ ‫‪١1‬‬ ‫‪٢2‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪ 1 ١‬ﺯﺭ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪٩9‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ ٩‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)‪B/X (PLAY / PAUSE‬‬ ‫)‪x (STOP‬‬ ‫)‪./> (SKIP‬‬ ‫)ﺔﻔﻴﻇﻭ( )‪(F‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﲑ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪٥5‬‬ ‫‪٤4‬‬ ‫‪٣3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪١1‬‬ ‫‪٢2‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪10 ١١‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪٩9‬‬ ‫‪٨8‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﱰﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 16
‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪Cable‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪Base‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬ ‫‪Screw‬‬ ‫‪2010.3.10 5:43:53 PM‬‬ ‫‪Speaker‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﱪ‬ ‫‪HB965DF-DD.BAUTLL_ARAB_0456.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺐ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬ ‫‪١٧‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ”–“ )ﺳﺎﻟﺐ( ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ”‪“+‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺭﻓﻖ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﱪﻏﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺭﻓﻖ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻏﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺑﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻏﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳊﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﱪﺍﻏﻲ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﳋﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﳚﺐ ﺛﻘﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪٦ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‪ :‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﻟﻠﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﲈﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﺒﻲ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋ ﹼﻠﻖ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺼﻨﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﳌﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ”–“ )ﺳﺎﻟﺐ( ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ”‪“+‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺟﺐ(‪.
PAGE 20
‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢١-٢٠‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٢‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﻬﲈ ﲠﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ‪ .(١٫٣‬ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﳊﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪SIMPLINK‬؟‬ ‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑـ ‪ ،HDCP‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﲠﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﲈ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪COMPONENT‬‬ ‫‪ (VIDEO OUT‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪ .Y Pb Pr‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪) VIDEO OUT‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪) video in‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺝ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫‪ .COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) HOME‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪ .ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ‪٥٧٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 24
‫‪٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻜﻮﻧﻚ ﰲ‬ ‫)‪) AUX L/R (INPUT‬ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ( ﺍﻷﻳﴪ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [AUX‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) RADIO&INPUT‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺪﺧﻞ( ﻭ‬ ‫‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ) (‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IN‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﰲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﰲ ‪ PORT IN‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ IN‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [PORTABLE‬ﳏﻤﻮﻝ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪) RADIO&INPUT‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺪﺧﻞ( ﻭ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‬ ‫) (‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) F‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪٢٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪٢/١‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﲠﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﰲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﻚ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI IN 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [٢/١ HDMI IN‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪) RADIO&INPUT‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺪﺧﻞ( ﻭ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‬ ‫) (‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) F‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪.HDMI IN 1/2 mode‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﳍﻮﻡ ﻟﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ BD-Live‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪٢٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ DHCP‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ )‪(LAN‬‬ ‫ﻋﱪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﳍﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻐﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]ﺷﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻓﻴﲈ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ]ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ[ ﻭ]ﺛﺎﺑﺖ[‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﱰﺕ ]ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ[ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫) ( ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﲆ ]ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ[ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪PC‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻﺣﻆ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[ – ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺒﺚ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﲠﺎ )‪ .(SSID‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﲆ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻳﺪﻭ ﹰﻳﺎ ﰲ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ[ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 120‬ﺭﻗﻢ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫‪٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺃﻱ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﳊﴫ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳚﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﳏﻠﻴﺔ ‪ Base-T 10‬ﺃﻭ ‪100‬‬ ‫‪ Base-TX‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﲠﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﹼ ﻐﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪٣٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪I/i‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.( ) ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻣﻠ ﹰﻔﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﰲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﳖﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١ - USB‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪٣٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪/USB‬ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪ FAT32‬ﻭ ‪ NTFS‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ ،BD-Live‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺳﻮ￯‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ‪ .FAT32‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪/USB‬‬ ‫ﳏﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ FAT16‬ﺃﻭ ‪ FAT32‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ‪.BD-Live‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺤﲇ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ BD-Live‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪٣٥‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﺎﲏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ )‬ ‫( ‪.HOME‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪TV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪ .( ) ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.
PAGE 36
‫‪٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺒﺘﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ .HDMI‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻭ‪ ٨٦‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﳐﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪ ،(EDID‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ‪ 1080i‬ﻛﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻓﱰﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫]‪[1080p‬‬ ‫ﳜﺮﺝ ‪1080‬ﺧﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻟﻐﺔ[‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻭﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪..‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺻﻮﺕ[‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺁﺧﺮ￯[‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .
PAGE 38
‫‪٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ‪HD AV‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﺮﺍ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ﹰﻧﺎ ﻳﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ "ﺑﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﹸﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ U u‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻋﲆ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﲔ ‪ 0‬ﻭ ‪ 300‬ﻣﻴﲇ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺗﺄﻣﲔ[‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ[‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﱰﺽ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﳌﺤﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫]‪ 1-8‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ )‪ (٨‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺧﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ[‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﱰﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪BD‬‬ ‫]‪[255‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ‪.BD-ROM‬‬ ‫]‪[0-254‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺁﺧﺮﻯ[‬ ‫‪DivX VOD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪®DIVX: DivX‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ .DivX‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺭﺳﻤ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ DivX‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DivX‬ﺯﻭﺭﻭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪ www.divx.com‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DIVX‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍ ﹸﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ®DivX‬ﳚﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳏﺘﻮ￯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )‪ .
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪٤١‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪) SOUND EFFECT‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﰐ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[Natural‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[Bypass‬ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﳎﺴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻃﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[Clear Voice‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻘ ﹰﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﺴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪٤٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪I/i‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.( ) ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪.( ) ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ,OPEN/CLOSE (Z‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ OPEN/CLOSE (Z‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺩﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪BD-ROM‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ DVD-ROM‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ x (STOP‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ X (PAUSE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ B (PLAY‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ X (PAUSE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ X (PAUSE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪BD‬‬ ‫‪MUSIC‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪MOVIE AVCHD‬‬ ‫‪ACD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪x (STOP‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ "‪) Xx‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(" ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﳐﺘﴫ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ B (PLAY‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﲆ )‪ x (STOP‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪) x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ(" ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫‪BD‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪AVCHD‬‬ ‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ACD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﱰﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ "ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ" ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [-A‬ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ) (‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﰲ ﳖﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍ ﹸﳌﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪REPEAT‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )‪) (OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪٤٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫‪BD‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪MOVIE AVCHD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪PHOTO MUSIC MOVIE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮ￯ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﳏﲇ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SEARCH‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﲪﺮ )‪.(R‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮ￯‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪( ) INFO/DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪MOVIE‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫‪BD‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﲤﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺯﺣﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﲪﻠﺖ ﻗﺮﺻ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪٤٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪BD‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪MOVIE AVCHD‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪( ) INFO/DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.U/u‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ ﹸﳌﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ RETURN (O‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.display.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﹸﳏﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪BD‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪MOVIE AVCHD‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ( ) INFO/DISPLAY‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ[ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﲏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،٢٠‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ "‪."٢١٠٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ I/i‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﹸﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ‬ ‫ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BD‬‬ ‫‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪( ) INFO/DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ RETURN (O‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪BD-LIVE‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﳌﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪BONUSVIEW (BD-ROM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1.1‬ﺑﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ﳖﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪٥٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪VR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (VR‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‬ ‫( ‪.HOME‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٢‬ﺇﱃ ‪.٥٠‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ VR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﳖﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-VR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪CPRM‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ .
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺳﲈﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻌﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MOVIE‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﳐﺘﻠ ﹰﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪MOVIE‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 54
‫‪٥٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‬ ‫( ‪.HOME‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ B (PLAY‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ x (STOP‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ X (PAUSE‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ B (PLAY‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪ INFO/DISPLAY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‬ ‫( ‪.HOME‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.U/u‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﳏﲇ[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 56
‫‪٥٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﳎﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )‪(CIFS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪DLNA‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪USB ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪USB ،‬‬ ‫‪CIFS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‬ ‫( ‪.HOME‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪DLNA‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٥٧‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﰲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ Z (OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪CD‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ Z (OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺩﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ INFO/DISPLAY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z REC‬ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪٥٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﰐ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﲆ ﴎﻋﺔ ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﲇ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٥٩‬‬ ‫‪BD/DVD‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ ﰲ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺟﺮﻳﺴﻨﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﳚﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺟﺮﻳﺴﻨﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺟﺮﻳﺴﻨﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫®‪ Gracenote‬ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ‬ ‫®‪ Gracenote‬ﻋﲆ ‪ www.gracenote.
PAGE 60
‫‪٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪iPod‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ iPod‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،HOME‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،iPod‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ‬ ‫• ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬‫‪) VIDEO OUT‬ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟـ ‪ iPod‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ iPod‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ iPod‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪iPod‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ RADIO&INPUT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪.iPod‬‬ ‫‪U/u/I/i‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪m/M‬‬ ‫>‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪٦٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) RADIO&INPUT‬ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ(‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﳏﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪ (+/-) TUNING‬ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺆﴍ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪.(+/-) TUNING‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮ￯ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﻭﻣﻠﻘﲈﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪DLNA‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪DLNA‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ :‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(٣٢ – ٢٧‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‬ ‫( ‪.HOME‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﳏﲇ[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ DLNA‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،U/u‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪٦٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٢‬ﺇﱃ ‪.٥٠‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﳏﲇ[ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ‪DLNA (Nero MediaHome‬‬ ‫‪ ،(4 Essentials‬ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﳏﲇ[ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﳌﻠﻘﲈﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١١‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﲈ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ‪ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ‪-١٦‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫• ‪ ٦٫٠ ®Windows® Internet Explorer‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫• ‪ ٩٫٠c ®DirectX‬ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ‪) ٣٠‬ﺃﻏﺴﻄﺲ ‪ (٢٠٠٦‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫• ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺛﲑ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪WLAN (IEEE ،‬‬ ‫‪(٨٠٢٫١١b/g/n‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ‪Nero‬‬ ‫‪ MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﰲ ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .
PAGE 66
‫‪٦٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(٣٣ – ٢٨‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) HOME‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﳏﲇ[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ DLNA‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،U/u‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍ ﹸﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ) ( ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦٧‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 68
‫‪٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪™NetCast‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﱰﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮ￯ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﱰﻓﻴﻪ ﰲ ﻧﻴﺘﻜﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٧‬ﺇﱃ ‪.(٣٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) HOME‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﻧﻴﺘﻜﺎﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪ – YouTube‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧١ - ٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ – Picasa Web Albums‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٤-٧٢‬‬ ‫‪ – AccuWeather‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٦-٧٥‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪™YouTube‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .YouTube‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﱰﺣﺔ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺎﱄ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍ ﹸﳌﺤﺪﺛﺔ‬ ‫ﲑﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﲆ ﺭﺗﺒﺔ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﲈ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ .
PAGE 70
‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ )‪ (Y‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻭ ﹰﻓﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﲈﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺭﻣﺰﹰ ﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺑﺤﺚ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﱰ‬ ‫]‪ [OK‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ[‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ YouTube‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺳﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[Picasa Web Albums‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [NetCast‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺳﺎ ‪Picasa‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺳﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻝ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ – ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ – ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪ .
PAGE 74
‫‪٧٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]ﺑﺤﺚ[ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪U/u/I/i‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺧﱰ ]‪ [OK‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺳﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﻴﻮﻭﻳﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪٧٥‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻝ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﴩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪.AccuWeather.com‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [AccuWeather‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪ [NetCast‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،I/i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪٧٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ[ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﻴﻮﻭﻳﺰﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺃﺿﻒ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫) ( ‪.ENTER‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٣ – ٢‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺪﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﱰ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪ [X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ]ﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪٧٧‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﰲ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻗﴡ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﲈ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﻭﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﺪ ﺍﳊﴩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫‪٧٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧٩‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ [HDMI‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﴫ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺒﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVI‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪٨٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ BD-Live‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٢-٢٧‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪BD-‬‬ ‫‪ .Live‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ [BD-LIVE‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﲆ ]ﳑﻨﻮﻉ[‪ .
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪٨١‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪/LG‬ﺟﻮﻟﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪U/u PR/CH‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﲈﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﲔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﱰﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﹸﺑﻮﻟﹺﻴﻔﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱪﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﲇ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﲔ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻣﺒﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻳﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﲈﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻛﻮﺍﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﴫ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﺎﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻴﻮﺑﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪2010.3.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪٨٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪] :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ[ ﻭ]ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ[‬ ‫ﻭ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪٦٥٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٧٠٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٧٦٨٤‬‬ ‫‪٨٣٨١‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻴﺸﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪٧١٧٦‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻻﺟﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪٧٧٧١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻻﻳﺎﻻﻡ‬ ‫‪٧٧٧٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٦٥٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪٦٥٧٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٧٢٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٦٩٧٦‬‬ ‫‪٦٥٨٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٦٥٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺰ ﹼﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻷ
PAGE 84
‫‪٨٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲢﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﹸﳜﱪﻙ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ‪:1‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫) ( ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺇﳖﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﲢﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﱂ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ“‪ .‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ( ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ"‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻠﻪ؟"‪.‬‬ ‫‪٨٥‬‬ ‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﳌﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﹸﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 86
‫‪٨٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪576i‬‬ ‫‪576p‬‬ ‫‪720p‬‬ ‫‪1080i‬‬ ‫‪1080p /24 Hz‬‬ ‫‪1080p / 50 Hz‬‬ ‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬ ‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫‪576p‬‬ ‫‪576p‬‬ ‫‪720p‬‬ ‫‪1080i‬‬ ‫‪1080p / 24 Hz‬‬ ‫‪1080p / 50 Hz‬‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪576i‬‬ ‫‪576p‬‬ ‫‪720p‬‬ ‫‪1080i‬‬ ‫‪1080i‬‬ ‫‪1080i‬‬ ‫‪576i‬‬ ‫‪576i‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪576i‬‬ ‫‪576p‬‬ ‫‪720p‬‬ ‫‪1080i‬‬ ‫‪1080p
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪٨٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪-High-Definition Multi‬‬ ‫‪ media Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ HDMI licensing LLC‬ﺍﳌﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪ "Blu-ray Disc‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ /.DVD‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻧﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﱰﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ BD-LIVE‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﴩﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﺍﻱ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪ "BONUSVIEW‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪٨٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫"‪ "AVCHD‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "‪ "AVCHD‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﺎﺳﻮﻧﻴﻚ ﻭﺳﻮﲏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﹸﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﱰﺍﻉ ‪AVC‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﱰﺍﻉ ‪ VC-1‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﻭﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ )‪ (1‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ AVC‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ("VC-1 ("AVC/VC-1 Video‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (2‬ﻓﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ AVC/VC-1‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﱰﻛﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍ ﹸﳌﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﱰﺩﺩ ‪ ٢٤٠-٢٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ٦٠ /٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻜﱪ‬ ‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ‪:FM‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠٨٫٠٠-٨٧٫٥٠‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٩٥‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ?ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ?ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )‪ ٢٨٤×٦٧×٤٣٩‬ﻣﻢ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٤٫٢‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 41‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﳖﻴﺖ ﺇﱃ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﳖﻴﺖ‬ ‫)‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ 35‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 5%‬ﺇﱃ ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪٩٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺍﻷﻳﴪ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ(‬ ‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٦٠‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١٦٥ x ٧٥٦ x ٢٥٠‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١٫٨‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٣٢٠
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺇﻗﺮﺃ ﺟﻴﺪﹰ ﺍ‪ .‬ﳜﻀﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﴩﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﺗﹸﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﳏﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﴩ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﱰﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﺗﹸﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ .
PAGE 92
‫‪٩٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﳎﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﲣﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺑﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺟﻨﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺑﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺟﻨﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ￯ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱰﺧﻴﺺ ‪) LGPL٢٫١/GPL٢٫٠‬ﺭﺧﺼﺔ ﺟﻨﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ /٢‬ﺭﺧﺼﺔ ﺟﻨﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ￯ ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫®‪Gracenote‬‬ ‫ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﲆ ﺑﺮﳎﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪.Gracenote، Inc‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺇﻳﻤﲑﻳﻔﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻴﻔﻮﺭﻧﻴﺎ )"‪ .("Gracenote‬ﻭﺍﻟﱪﳎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪") Gracenote‬ﺑﺮﳎﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ("Gracenote‬ﲤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺑﲈ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )"ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪("Gracenote‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ )ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ("Gracenote‬ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱄ ﺗﺄﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .
PAGE 94
HB965DF-DD.BAUTLL_ARAB_0456.indd 94 2010.3.